Owners manual

ManualsBrandsLG Electronics ManualsCell PhoneGD900

ELECTRONICS INC.GD900 ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻣ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ

GD900 User GuideGD900

ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻣ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ

ﻲﺑﺮﻋ

ENGLISH

ﻲﺑﺮﻋ

P/N : MMBB0338602

(

1.1

)

www.lgmobile.com

P/N : MMBB0338602

(

1.1

)

www.lgmobile.com

Summary of content (234 pages)

PAGE 1
ENGLISH P/N : MMBB0338602 (1.1) G GD900 ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ELECTRONICS INC. www.lgmobile.com GD900 ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬ ENGLISH ‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬ www.lgmobile.com GD900 User Guide P/N : MMBB0338602 (1.
PAGE 2
Bluetooth QD ID B015268
PAGE 3
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍ ﹰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.
PAGE 4
‫ﺗﻬﺎﻧﻴﻨﺎ ﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻚ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪ GD900‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ ﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫‪،LG‬‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ‪.
PAGE 5
PAGE 6
‫ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ﹼﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ‪8.................................‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ‪10...............................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪11................................‬‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪13...........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪14...........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪16.........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪17..............
PAGE 7
‫‪32‬‬ ‫‪33‬‬ ‫‪33‬‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫‪35‬‬ ‫‪35‬‬ ‫‪35‬‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫‪37‬‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫‪39‬‬ ‫‪39‬‬ ‫‪39‬‬ ‫‪39‬‬ ‫‪40‬‬ ‫‪40‬‬ ‫‪41‬‬ ‫‪42‬‬ ‫‪42‬‬ ‫‪42‬‬ ‫‪43‬‬ ‫‪44‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪45.....................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ﹼﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ‪45...................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪46...........................................‬‬ ‫ﲟﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪47...........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪48...........
PAGE 8
‫ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﻱ‪70.............................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪70..........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪71....................................................‬‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪71.........................................................‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‪72...........................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪72..............................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪72....................................‬‬ ‫ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪73..
PAGE 9
‫‪78‬‬ ‫‪79‬‬ ‫‪79‬‬ ‫‪79‬‬ ‫‪80‬‬ ‫‪80‬‬ ‫‪81‬‬ ‫‪81‬‬ ‫‪81‬‬ ‫‪82‬‬ ‫‪82‬‬ ‫‪83‬‬ ‫‪83‬‬ ‫‪84‬‬ ‫‪84‬‬ ‫‪84‬‬ ‫‪85‬‬ ‫‪85‬‬ ‫‪85‬‬ ‫‪86‬‬ ‫‪87‬‬ ‫‪87‬‬ ‫‪88‬‬ ‫‪88‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪88................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ‪89....................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪89....................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪89....................................................‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Windows Media‬‬ ‫‪90........................
PAGE 10
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ﹼﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‬ ‫• ﺭﻓﺾ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻃﻠﺐ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﲢﺬﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺛﻘﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳉﻠﻮﺱ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﳊﺎﻕ ﺿﺮﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .
PAGE 11
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ‪ ،‬ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﻛﺒﻞ‬ ‫‪(USB‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‪ :‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ‬ ‫‪ ،USB‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫• ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﹰﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪.
PAGE 12
‫ﺗﺜ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪SIM‬‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪ | LG GD900‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
PAGE 13
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻧﺰﻉ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺃﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﲢﺬﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﳊﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SIM‬‬ ‫ﹺ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﻣﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،SIM‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،SIM‬ﺍﺩﻓﻌﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻄﻒ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﻃﻘﻄﻘﺔ‪ ..‬ﻭﺃﺧﺮﺟﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ‪.
PAGE 14
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ ﺑﺈﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻟﺤﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 15
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺣ ﹼﺮﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ .GD900‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺷﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ GD900‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧ ﹰﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ“‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ )ﺃﻭ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 14‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ(‪.
PAGE 16
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﹺ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﻣﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﲢﺬﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﳊﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.
PAGE 17
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻬﻴﺄ ﹰﺓ ﺃﺻﻼﹰ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻦ ﻣﻬﻴﺄﺓﹰ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﺗﻠﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.
PAGE 18
‫ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ‪ .
PAGE 19
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﻣﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎ ﹰ ﺟﻴﺪﺍ ﹰ ﻟﺘﻌﺘﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻑ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ﹼﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻤﺴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﹴﹺ‬ ‫ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺱ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 20
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﻤﺎﺀ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫• ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ‪.
PAGE 21
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ GD900‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻻ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻘﹼ ﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 22
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺷ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻻ ﹰ ﺳﻬﻼﹰ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻟﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻐ‬ ‫ﻟﻤ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻹﺣﻀﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﹼ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﹺ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‪ :‬ﹺ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ .
PAGE 23
‫ﺮ‬ ‫ﻢ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ GD900‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺠﺮﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻻ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ‪.
PAGE 24
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺧﺮﺍﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻴﻚ ﻣﻌﺎ ﹰ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺑﻌﺎﺩﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ‪.
PAGE 25
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻟﻤﺲ ﹼ‬ ‫ﺷﻔﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻔﹼ ﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ‪ :‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﹰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺑﻨﻘﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﺻﺒﻊ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻼﹰ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﹰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.
PAGE 26
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﹼ ﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ Divx‬ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺭﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﹼ ﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ▲‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﺘﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻚ‪.
PAGE 27
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ‬ ‫‪T‬‬ ‫ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪U‬‬ ‫‪V‬‬ ‫@‬ ‫‪W‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﻛﻞ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪Y‬‬ ‫‪Z‬‬ ‫‪ß‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰﻳﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪25‬‬
PAGE 28
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻓﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﹼ ﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻭﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ‪ :‬ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻟﻤﺲ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺭﻣﻮﺯﺍ ﹰ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔ ﹰﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺷﺄﻥ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻧﺸﻄﺎ ﹰ‪.
PAGE 29
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪FM‬‬ ‫ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ‪.
PAGE 30
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﳌ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗ‬ ‫ﻹ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻭﺟﻴﻜﺘﻮﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺇﺟ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺟﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.
PAGE 31
‫ﺍﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻹﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﳌﻨﻊ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺃ ﹼﻭﻝ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﹺ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻑ )ﺃﺣﺮﻑ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺭﻗﻢ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 32
‫ﺍﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺿ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻠﻚ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻟﻦ‬ ‫ﻛﺘﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻄﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﻜﻠﻢ ﻣﻌﻪ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.
PAGE 33
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺚ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭﹶﻳﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻄﻠﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌ ﹼﻴﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‪.
PAGE 34
‫ﺍﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺠﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺠﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺠﻼﺕ ‪ -‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ‪ -‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺳ ﹸﻴﻔﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺗﺠﺮﻳﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 35
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﺍﳌﺲ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﳌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻭﻗﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺪﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻻﹰ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻴﻚ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 36
‫ﺍﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﲡﻤﻴﻊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫‪ PIN2‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺣﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻃﻠﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺭﻓﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ‪ -‬ﻣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻟـ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .
PAGE 37
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺯﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ‬ ‫ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎﺀ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﹺ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ‪.USIM‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 38
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻨﺰﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻬﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻳﺪ ﻣﻴﻼﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺫﻛﺮﻯ ﻭﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻤﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﹺ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.
PAGE 39
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ‪ -‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪ SIM‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SIM‬‬ ‫ﺐ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻲ ﹺ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻋﺎﺩ ﹰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﻱ ﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﳌﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎﺀ ‪ -‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﻌﻢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.
PAGE 40
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ GD900‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ‪ MMS‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺪﻳﻬﻴﺔ ﻭﺳﻬﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﳋﺼﻢ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﺻﻴﺪﻙ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺗﺮﺳﻞ ﻟﻪ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.
PAGE 41
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ‪Abc‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻢ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﺺ ‪ T9‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﺆﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫)ﻣﺜﻼﹰ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،T9‬ﺳﺘﺮﻯ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ T9‬ﺗﻨﺒﺆﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ T9‬ﻗﺎﻣﻮﺳﺎ ﹰ ﻣﻀﻤﻨﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﺘﺒﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍ ﹰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻠﻤﺴﻬﺎ‪ .
PAGE 42
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻢ ﻭﺩ ﹼﻭﻥ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺘﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﹺ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ WiFi‬ﻧﺸﻂ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺗﻠﻘﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪.
PAGE 43
‫ﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺩ ‪ -‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ‪ -‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻮﺍﻝ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ )ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻮﺍﻝ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪-‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ ‪ -‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﹼ‬ ‫ﻭﺷﻐﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‪.
PAGE 44
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺑﻂ ‪ -‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫)‪ (SMS‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻳﺚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺎﺗﻲ ‪ -‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻠﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.
PAGE 45
‫ﻮﺯ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﹺ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﻢ‪ -‬ﻣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺑﺘﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻠﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻼﺣﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻠﻚ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ‪ -‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻛﺲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪ X.400‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ـ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻠﻚ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻛـ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻛﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.
PAGE 46
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺈﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺑﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻼﺣﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺘﻚ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ‪ -‬ﻣﻘ ﹼﻴﺪ‪ /‬ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ /‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ‪ -‬ﹺ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.
PAGE 47
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﹼﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ -‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ‪ -‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.48‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ‪ -‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ -‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺍﻭ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻭ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﺍﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.
PAGE 48
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻣﻊ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﺻ ﹼﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﺤ ﹼﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﹼ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪.
PAGE 49
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛـ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 38‬ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪ 101‬ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.
PAGE 50
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﻫﻮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌ ﹼﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺿﺒﺎﺑﻴ ﹰﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻗ ﹰﺔ ﻭﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ -‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﺘﻀﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.
PAGE 51
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ ,‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺕ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻔﻌﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻛﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪.
PAGE 52
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ -‬ﻏ ﹼﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺣﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.51‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.52‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﻣﺘﻮﻫﺞ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺸﻤﺲ ﻭﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﻭﻏﺎﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺟﺪﺍﹰ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﻗﻴﻘ ﹰﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺤ ﹰﺔ‪ .
PAGE 53
‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺯ‬ ‫ﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﻬﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺷﺄﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭ‪.ISO‬‬ ‫ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﺗﻘﻊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺳﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﻠﻒ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻮﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 54
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎ ﹰ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ‪ LG GD900‬ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 640x480‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﺎﻟﺐ‪ ،‬ﻭﺯﺧﺮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 55
‫‪ 3‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬ﺍﳌﺲ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‬ ‫ﻰ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺿﻤﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 56
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﹼﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ‪ -‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.56‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ -‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪56‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 57
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﹰﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘ ﹰﺔ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓ ﹰﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﹰﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 58
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌ ﹼﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺿﺒﺎﺑﻴ ﹰﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻗ ﹰﺔ ﻭﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﻭﺃﻛﺪ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﻧﻌﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.
PAGE 59
‫ﺕ‬ ‫ﺕ‬ ‫ﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ -‬ﺑ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪LG GD900‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 59‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ -‬ﻏ ﹼﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.58‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 60
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺍﹰ‪ ،‬ﺑﻘﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺤﺘﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﺣﺠﻤﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎ ﹰ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫)‪ - 720X480 (D1‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪.
PAGE 61
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎ ﹰ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺳﺘﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺯﺧﺮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﰎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻪ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻦ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﰎ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻪ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.
PAGE 62
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺮ ﹰﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﹰﺓ ﻹﺣﻀﺎﺭﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ GD900‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫‪ 320x240‬ﻭ‪ 176x144‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 63
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻬﻤﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻴﻚ ﻣﻌﺎ ﹰ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺑﻌﺎﺩﻫﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﻜ ﹼﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.
PAGE 64
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺋﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﻙ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﻔﺎﺀ ﺑﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻚ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺣ ﹼﺮﻙ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺿﻒ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﹰ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ ﹰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻚ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ .
PAGE 65
‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﺺ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﺺ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺣﻔﻆ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺣ ﹼﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﻪ ﻭﺩﻓﻌﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 66
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺒ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺗﺼﻔﻴﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﺰﺀﺍ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺣﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻼﹰ‪ ،‬ﺷﻌﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺛﻴﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻻ ﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ‪.
PAGE 67
‫ﻣﺒﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ‪MPEG4‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ‪.(D1) 720x480‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﺰﺀﺍ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻼﹰ‪ ،‬ﺷﻌﺮ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺛﻴﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﻧﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻄﻂ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻦ‬ ‫ﺲ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪.
PAGE 68
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺬﻳﺐ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﻄﻌﻲ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻌﺎﹰ‬ ‫ﹶ‬ ‫ﺩﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺳﺘﻔﺘﺢ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺧﺎﺻﺘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺩﻣﺠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻭﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺘﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺩﻣﺞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻌﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺛﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪.
PAGE 69
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻭﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺘﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻟﺪﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻊ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺣﻔﻆ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 70
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺇﺿ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺩﺑﻠﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺳﺘﻔﺘﺢ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺳﺘﻔﺘﺢ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺗﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.
PAGE 71
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﱠ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 72
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺳﻬﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻴﺚ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﳊﺬﻑ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺲ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ‪.
PAGE 73
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻒ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻛﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺓ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛـ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪,‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪,‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎﺀ‪ ,‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ ‪ -‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 74
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﺻ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.
PAGE 75
‫ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺗﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺧﺎﺻﺘﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺗﻲ‪.
PAGE 76
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺯﺭ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ,‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪,‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺴﻴﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺗﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 77
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪M-Toy‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ‪ M-Toy‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺗﹸﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺭﺟﺢ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ LG PC Suite‬ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 87‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ SWF‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 78
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺒ ﹼﻴﻦ ﻟﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 79
‫ﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﻣﻀﻤﻨﺎ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪LG‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫‪ GD900‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻞ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ -‬ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪.
PAGE 80
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﺬ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 81
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻚ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ LG GD900‬ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪ FM‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺭﺍﺝ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻞ‪.
PAGE 82
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺗﻔﺤﺺ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺛﻢ ﻧﻌﻢ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ ﹰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪ FM‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ .
PAGE 83
‫ﺍﳌﻨﺴﻖ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﻉ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻄﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﱘ‪ .‬ﺍﳌﺲ ﻛﻞ ﻳﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻄﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﳌﺲ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺃﻳﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻄﻞ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻣﻮﻋﺪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺫﻛﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻋﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﻼﺩ‪ .
PAGE 84
‫ﺍﳌﻨﺴﻖ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺗﻌ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻫﻮ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻼﹰ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫‪ 60‬ﻳﻮﻣﺎ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪ 10.10.09‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫‪.09.12.2009‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻘﹼ ﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻋﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪.
PAGE 85
‫ﻰ‬ ‫ﺦ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﹼﻪ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻨﺒﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻨﺒﻪ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﻟﻠﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻨﺒﻪ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻓﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ‪.
PAGE 86
‫ﺍﳌﻨﺴﻖ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺠﹼ ﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﺴﺠﹼ ﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻭ ﻋﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 87
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ )‪ ،+‬ﺃﻭ –‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪ x‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫÷(‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﻴﻬﺎ =‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ‪ ،sin‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻘﻴﺪﺍﹰ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ ،cos‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،tan‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،deg‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،log‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪.
PAGE 88
‫ﺍﳌﻨﺴﻖ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫‪e‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ‪.‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺭﺓ ﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ‪.‬ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗ‬ ‫ﺗ‬ ‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺑﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 89
‫‪PC Suite‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻟﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ PC Suite‬ﺍﳌﺰ ﹼﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ‪http://update.lgmobile.‬‬ ‫‪) .com‬ﻓﻲ ‪www.lgmobile.
PAGE 90
‫‪PC Suite‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ PC Suite‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ LG PC Suite‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ! ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ‪LG PC‬‬ ‫‪ Suite‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻀﻐﻮﻁ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺒﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻟـ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ‪ .
PAGE 91
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺕ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﻔﻆ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻵﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ‪.
PAGE 92
‫‪PC Suite‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ( < ‪Control‬‬ ‫‪) Panel‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣ ﹼﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺎﺳﺢ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ”‪GD900‬‬ ‫‪ “Music Sync Player‬ﻓﻲ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪USB‬‬ ‫)ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻻ ﹰ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ“ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 93
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪iSync‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪ iSync‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺃﻭ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Macintosh‬ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪ ،USB‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ iSync‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪.
PAGE 94
‫‪PC Suite‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ‪ DivX® :DIVX VIDEO‬ﻫﻮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺘﻜﺮﺗﻪ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ ..DivX, Inc‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪DivX‬‬ ‫‪ Certified‬ﻭﺭﺳﻤﻲ ﹼ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻐﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ .DivX‬ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ‪www.divx.‬‬ ‫‪ com‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.DivX‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ‪:DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND‬‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ®‪DivX Certified‬‬ ‫ﺑﻬﺪﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ‪DIVX VIDEO-ON-‬‬ ‫‪ .(VOD) DEMAND‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣ ﹼﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ DivX VOD‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .
PAGE 95
‫ﻭﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﻳﺼﻠﻚ ﺑﻌﺎﻟﻢ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺧﺒﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻓﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﹰﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺜﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﺖ ﻭﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻔﻌﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﹼ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻌﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﺳﻬﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.
PAGE 96
‫ﻭﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ‪RSS‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻐ‬ ‫ﺇ ﹼﻥ ‪ (Really Simple Syndication) RSS‬ﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﺰ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﻪ‪ ،‬ﺷﺄﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻭﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺐ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪ ‪ ،RSS‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﹸﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺟﺰ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺰ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻣﻘﺘﺮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ‬ ‫‪ RSS‬ﻟﻸﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻘﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻌﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺗﻤﺘﺔ ﺃﺳﻬﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ ﹰ‪.
PAGE 97
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﻭﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪:USB‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪ LG PC Suite‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻻﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪ .‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪,‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ\ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ‪ ,‬ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪ ,‬ﺍﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺩﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺑﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ‪.
PAGE 98
‫ﺍﻹ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺮﺍﺋﻂ ‪Google‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻣﺮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪.GD900‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻓﻲ ‪Google‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﺮﺍﺋﻂ‬ ‫‪ Google‬ﻓﻲ ‪ Google‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻔﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪ GD900‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪LG PC‬‬ ‫‪ Suite‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻧﺸﻂ‪.
PAGE 99
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪G‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻜﻴﻴﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪.GD900‬‬ ‫ﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.34‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﹰﺓ ﻟﻺﻗﻔﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪.
PAGE 100
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻴﻨﺌ ﹴﺬ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺮﻳﺔ ﺗﻜﻴﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ GD900‬ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 101
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ - :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ‪ -‬ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ‪1/2/3‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ‪ -‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ‪ -‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪1/2/3‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ -‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 102
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ ‪ -‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ‪..‬‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ ‪ -‬ﻟﻘﺪ ﻗﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﺎﻓﺎ ‪ -‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ‪،Java‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ‪ GD900‬ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺬﺍﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ )ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.
PAGE 103
‫‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻠﻒ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻨﻌﻚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺈﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻋﺎﺩ ﹰﺓ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻠﻘﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﺫ ﻻ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺎ ﹰ ﻭﺳﻬﻼﹰ‪ .
PAGE 104
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﻣﻠﻒ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻗﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟـ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻄﺎﻟﺒﻚ ﺑﻘﺒﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺳﺘﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻙ ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﺩ ﹰﺓ ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 105
‫ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺁﺧﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ GD900‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻤﻲ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺃﻣﺎﻧﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺤﺚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺳﻴﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ GD900‬ﻋﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺠﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻧﻪ ﹺ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪.
PAGE 106
‫‪WiFi‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪) WiFi‬ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪LAN‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺎ ﹰ‪ WiFi .‬ﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﻭﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺃﻭﺳﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻭﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ GD900‬ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪،WEP‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ‪ ،WPA-PSK/2‬ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ‪ ،EAP‬ﻭﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 107
‫ﻢ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫‪ (2‬ﺇﻥ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻤﻂ ﻳﺴﻬﹼ ﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (3‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ‬ ‫‪ ،DHCP‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻭﺻﻒ ﻛﻞ ﺣﻘﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ‪.WiFi‬‬ ‫‪ (1‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪) SSID :‬ﻣﻌ ﹼﺮﻑ(‬ ‫‪ (2‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺩﻋﻢ ‪.WPA-PSK/2 ،WEP‬‬ ‫‪ (3‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 108
‫ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﳌ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪LG‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪.http://update.lgmobile.com‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺮﻳﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻨﺎ‪.
PAGE 109
‫ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻓﺮ‪) .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻓﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫‪ GD900‬ﻭﺑﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﻝ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 110
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺟﺎﺀ ﻭﺻﻔﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ ،E-GSM 900‬ﻭ‪ ،DCS 1800‬ﻭ‪GSM‬‬ ‫‪ ،850‬ﻭ‪ PCS 1900‬ﻭ‪.W-CDMA‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺴﻤﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 111
E-GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / GSM 850 / PCS 1900 Quad Band and WCDMA Terminal Equipment GD900 R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC EN 301 489-1 V1.6.1 / EN 301 489-7 V1.3.1 / EN 301 489-17 V1.2.1 / EN 301 489-24 V1.3.1 EN 60950-1: 2001 EN 50360 / EN62209-1: 2006 EN 301 511 V9.0.2 / EN 301 908-1 V3.2.1 / EN 301 908-2 V3.2.1 EN 300 328 V1.7.
PAGE 112
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻣﺮﺍ ﹰ ﺧﻄﺮﺍ ﹰ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ )‪ .(SAR‬ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ‪ GD900‬ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻔﻲ ﺑﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 113
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪/‬‬ ‫ﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻮﺍﺣﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﳌﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﲔ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﶈﻤﻮﻝ ﹼ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﶈﻤﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺍ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻋﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻨﻲ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺆﻫﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻹﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺿﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.
PAGE 114
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌ ﹼﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﺬﺍﻛﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ؛ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺣﺎﺩ ﺇﺫ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌ ﹼﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻠﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻛﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺑﺤﺬﺭ‪ .‬ﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺳﺒﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﹼ‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌ ﹼﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 115
‫ﻣﺎ‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻻﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻮ ﹼﻗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺘﺪﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ‪ RF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺓ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﹰﺓ ﺑﻜﻴﺲ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺒﻄﻞ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.
PAGE 116
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﻔﺠﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺠﻴﺮ ﺟﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺗ ﹼﺘﺴﻢ ﺃﺟﻮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻗﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺫﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﹺﻗﺒﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻃﻔﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍ ﹰ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻬﻮ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻭﺗﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺘﻨﺎﻕ‪.
PAGE 117
‫ﻥ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺃﺩﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻞ‬ ‫• ﺃﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻔﺖ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺻﻼﺣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌ ﹼﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻨﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻡ‪.
PAGE 118
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺮﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﻈﻤﻬﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﻬﻼﹰ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻪ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺄ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪GSM‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ‪ .
PAGE 119
‫ﺐ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼﹰ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺘﻀﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻓﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺧﻠﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺴﺨﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻪ‪.
PAGE 120
PAGE 121
Some of the contents in this manual may differ from your phone depending on the software of the phone or your service provider.
PAGE 122
C a d co
PAGE 123
Congratulations on your purchase of the advanced and compact GD900 phone by LG, designed to operate with the latest digital mobile communication technology.
PAGE 124
Contents Set up Using call barring ....................................33 Changing the common call setting ..34 Getting to know your phone ............... 8 Changing your video call settings.....34 Open view .................................................10 Installing the SIM and battery ...........11 Contacts .....................................................35 Searching for a contact .........................35 Charging your phone............................13 Adding a new contact .................
PAGE 125
33 34 34 35 35 35 36 36 37 38 38 38 39 39 39 39 40 40 41 42 42 42 43 44 Get creative Camera .......................................................45 Getting to know the viewfinder ........45 Taking a quick photo..............................46 Once you’ve taken the photo .............46 Using the flash ..........................................47 Adjusting the exposure.........................48 Adjusting the zoom ................................48 Taking a continuous shot .....................
PAGE 126
Contents Creating a slide show .............................70 Checking your memory status ...........70 Sounds ........................................................70 Using a sound ...........................................70 Videos .........................................................71 Sending a video clip ...............................71 Games and Applications ......................71 Playing a game .........................................72 Using the options menu ......................
PAGE 127
79 79 79 80 80 81 81 81 82 82 82 83 83 83 84 84 84 85 85 85 86 86 87 Using ISync ................................................87 DivX Converter .........................................88 The web Browser .......................................................89 Accessing the web ..................................89 Adding and accessing bookmarks ....89 Using the RSS reader ..............................90 Accessing a saved page ........................90 Viewing your browser history .............
PAGE 128
Getting to know your phone Power key Turns the phone on/off. Earpiece Proximity Sensor Inner camera End key • Rejects a call. • Press once to return to the home screen. Multi-tasking key Send key Dials a phone number and answers incoming calls. Battery release button WARNING: Putting a heavy object on the phone or sitting on it can damage its LCD and touch screen functionality. Do not cover the protection film on proximity sensor of LCD. It can be caused the malfunction of sensor.
PAGE 129
Handsfree or Stereo earphone connector/ Charger, Data cable (USB cable) TIP: Before connecting the USB cable, wait until the phone has powered up and has registered on the network. Volume keys • When the screen is idle: key tone volume. • During a call: earpiece volume. • When playing a track: controls volume continuously. Camera key • Go to the camera menu directly by pressing and holding the key.
PAGE 130
Open view In 1 SIM card socket Battery cover Flash light 2 Battery Memory card socket Camera lens Battery release button 10 LG GD900 | User Guide
PAGE 131
Installing the SIM and battery 1 Remove the battery cover Use your thumbnail to open the battery release button on the bottom of the phone and lift off the battery cover. WARNING: Do not remove the battery when the phone is switched on, as this may damage the phone. 3 Install the SIM card Slide the SIM card into the SIM card holder. Make sure the gold contact area on the card is facing downwards. To remove the SIM card, gently push it until it clicks. Gently pull it out.
PAGE 132
Installing the SIM and battery C 4 Install the battery Insert the top of the battery into the top edge of the battery compartment first. Ensure that the battery contacts align with the phone’s terminals. Press the bottom of the battery down until it clips into place.
PAGE 133
Charging your phone Slide back the cover of the charger connector on the side of your GD900. Insert the charger and plug it into a mains electricity socket. Your GD900 must be charged until the “Battery full“ message appears on the screen. NOTE: The battery must be fully charged initially to improve battery lifetime. Disregard the first “Battery full” message and keep the phone on charge overnight.
PAGE 134
Memory card Installing a memory card You can expand the available memory space on your phone by using a memory card. NOTE: A memory card is an optional accessory. Slide the memory card into the slot at the top, until it clicks into place. Make sure the gold contact area is facing downwards. WARNING: Slide into the memory card to the slot, otherwise, the card can be damaged.
PAGE 135
Formatting the memory card Transferring your contacts Your memory card may already be formatted. If it isn’t, you will need to format it before you can start to use it. NOTE: All files get deleted while formatting. 1 From the home screen select and choose Phone settings from the Settings tab. 2 Scroll and touch Memory Info then scroll and select External memory. 3 Touch Format and then confirm your choice. 4 Enter the password, if one has been set. The card will then be formatted and ready to use.
PAGE 136
Menu map Y Touch in the home screen to open a Top menu. From here you can access further menus by scrolling through the icons: Communication, Multimedia, Utilities and Settings.
PAGE 137
Your home screen From this screen you can access menu options, make a call, view the status of your phone and much more. • Whenever your GD900 is not in use, it will return to the lock screen. Touch screen tips The home screen is also a great place to get used to using the touch screen. To select an item, touch the centre of the icon. • Do not to press too hard; the touchscreen is sensitive enough to pick up on a light, firm touch. • Use the tip of your finger to touch the option you require.
PAGE 138
Your home screen Customising the home screen 1 Shortcut home screen 2 Widget home screen (active) • Home screen customisation - For each type of home screen you are able to add and remove objects by pressing & holding your finger on the screen, or if already added touching and holding one of the objects.
PAGE 139
Get in touch with your GD900 The User Interface is based on four types of Homescreens. To swap between the home screens just wipe quickly over display from left to right or from right to left. NOTE: Use flicking to navigate without disturbing the display area.
PAGE 140
Your home screen Quick keys To The quick keys on your home screen provide easy, one-touch access to the functions you use the most. Th sc de ca O To to Touch to bring up the touch dialling pad, which lets you make a call. Enter the number using the normal key pad and touch Voice call . or tap To make a video call to this number, touch Video Call after entering the number. Touch to open your contacts. To search for the number you want to call: Enter the name of the contact using the touchpad.
PAGE 141
e . Touch screen The controls on the GD900 touch screen change dynamically, depending on the task you are carrying out. Opening Applications To open any Application, simply touch its icon. Scrolling Drag from side to side to scroll. On some screens, such as web pages, you can also scroll up or down.
PAGE 142
Your home screen Zooming In or Out When viewing photos, web pages, emails, or maps, you can zoom in and out. Pinch your fingers together or slide them apart.
PAGE 143
Transparent Touchpad Make the most of your Transparent Touchpad. 1 Touchpad Shortcut : You can assign a symbol for the most commonly used menus. Assign a symbol to each shortcut, so you can instantly access your favourite functions with simple finger gestures. For example, if you draw on the Transparent Touchpad, it will instantly go to Email. 2 Easy click : You can click on the Transparent Touchpad without covering the main screen while using the Web Browser.
PAGE 144
Your home screen 3 Touch wheel: Adjust the volume or brightness by drawing and on the Transparent Touchpad in Music, Divx Playback, Camera and Video Camera. You can also zoom in or zoom out by drawing or on the Transparent Touchpad in Camera mode, and Video Camera mode. (ABC), letters you type will be inserted as capital letters even if you write in small letters, and vice . versa. Touch ▲ and Touch You can write on the screen with your finger.
PAGE 145
f ce h Letter Q Strokes Mark R S U Numbers V W X Y Z ß Accented characters Space Backspace Strokes Full stop At @ T Accent Punctuation marks Strokes Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Strokes Enter 25
PAGE 146
Your home screen 5 Normal Keypad : The Transparent Touchpad can also be used to input numbers and text in a familiar way. Note The Transparent Touchpad is made of Tempered Glass. Viewing the status bar 6 Favourites : Display your favourite contacts, songs and photos on . the screen by touching The status bar uses different icons to show conditions such as signal strength, new messages and battery life as well as whether Bluetooth or data connections is active.
PAGE 147
ry r ee Icon Description Bluetooth Stereo headset Icon Description Multi-tasking Bluetooth Mono headset Music paused Bluetooth on Music playing Bluetooth Transfer FM radio playing Bluetooth Visibility Email being sent Downloading Email receiving Downloading complete. MMS Downloading cancelled.
PAGE 148
Your home screen C Icon Description External memory T k p m Battery status Projector/TV out Using the Multi - tasking function Touch the multitasking hard key to open the Multitasking menu. From here you can view some applications that are running and access them with one touch.
PAGE 149
Calls TIP! Press the power key to lock the touchscreen to prevent calls being made by mistake. Making a call or a video call 1 Touch to open the keypad. 2 Type in the number on the keypad. To delete a digit, press the clear key. 3 Touch the key to make the call. 4 To end the call, touch the key. TIP! To enter + in order to make international calls, touch twice, or press and hold down . Calling your contacts 1 From the home screen touch to open your Contacts.
PAGE 150
Calls In-call options A Speaker - Touch on. Contacts Memo to turn the speaker phone Mute - Touch to turn the microphone off so the person you are talking to cannot hear you. Sp Hold - Touch Yo co 1 to put a call on hold. Options - Choose from a list of further in-call options, including creating new memo and going to messages, so you can check your messages and add contacts during a call. You can also end the call from here by touching End call.
PAGE 151
Adjusting call volume To adjust the volume during a call, use the up and down button on the right side of the phone. Speed dialling g You can assign a frequently-called contact to a speed dial number. 1 From the home screen touch to open your Contacts. 2 Touch and select Speed dials. 3 Your voicemail is already set to speed dial 1. You cannot change this. Touch any other number to assign it to a speed dial contact. 4 Your contacts list will open.
PAGE 152
Calls NOTE: You will be charged for each call you make. Turning off DTMF DTMF lets you use numerical commands to navigate within automated calls. DTMF default is set to on. To turn it off during a call (to make and a note of a number) touch select Disable DTMF. Viewing your call logs From the home screen, touch , then touch Recent history in 32 LG GD900 | User Guide the Communication tab.
PAGE 153
d t s. Using call divert and choose Call 1 Touch settings in the Settings tab. 2 Touch Call divert and select Voice calls and/or Video calls. 3 Choose whether to divert all call, when the line is busy, when there is no answer or when you cannot be contacted. 4 Touch Activate to activate. 5 Enter the number to divert to. NOTE: Diverting calls will incur charges. Please contact your network operator for details. TIP! To turn off all call diverts, choose Deactivate all from the Call divert menu.
PAGE 154
Calls Changing the common call setting 1 Touch and choose Call settings in the Settings tab. 2 Touch Common settings. This lets you change the following settings: Call reject - Slide the switch left for ON. You can touch the Reject list to choose all calls, specific contacts or groups or calls from unregistered numbers or No caller ID (i.e. not in your contacts). Send my number - Choose whether to display your number on an outgoing call. Auto redial - Slide the switch left for ON or right for OFF.
PAGE 155
et or e o g Contacts Searching for a contact Adding a new contact There are two ways to search for a contact: From the home screen 1 From the home screen, touch to open your Contacts. Touch and enter the contact name using the key pad. 2 Touch Video call or Voice call or the key to place the call. 1 From the home screen, touch and then touch then select New contact button. 2 Choose whether to save the contact to Handset or USIM. 3 If you want to add a picture to the new contact, touch Add picture.
PAGE 156
Contacts 8 You can also add a Ringtone, Homepage, Home address, Company name, Job title, Company address, Birthday, Anniversary and a Memo. to save the contact. 9 Touch TIP! You can create customised groups for your contacts. See Creating a group. Creating a group 1 From the home screen, touch and then touch Contacts in the Communication tab. 2 Touch Contacts on the top of the screen then touch Groups and select new group. 3 Enter a name for the new group. 4 Touch to save the group.
PAGE 157
gs r of e Move all - This works in the same way as Copy, but the contact is stored at the new location only. Therefore, once a contact is moved from the SIM to the handset it will be deleted from the SIM memory. Clear contacts - Delete all your contacts. Touch Yes if you are sure you want to delete all your contacts. Memory info - View memory capacity information. TIP! To add your own business card, select My business card and enter your details as you would for any contact. Touch Save icon to finish.
PAGE 158
Messaging Messaging Your GD900 combines SMS, MMS into one intuitive, easy-to-use menu. There are two ways of entering the messaging centre: 1 From the home screen, touch , then scroll to Messaging or on the Communication tab. Sending a message 1 Touch then Write message to open a blank message. 2 Touch To to enter the recipient’s number, or open your contacts or favourites. You can add multiple contacts. When you are finished, touch the message box below to start composing the message text.
PAGE 159
s, w Entering text and 3 to write ‘telephone’. Keypad. Abc manual Touch to turn on T9 predictive texting. Touch to change the writing language. Tap to change between the number, symbol and text keypads. In Abc mode you have to touch the key repeatedly to enter a letter. For example, to write ‘hello’, touch 4 twice, 3 twice, 5 three times, 5 three more times, then 6 three times. Use to scroll through the different keyboards in each text entry mode (e.g. capital or lower case letters). .
PAGE 160
Messaging 1 Touch from the home screen, and scroll to Email on the Communication tab. 2 Touch Write email. If the email account is not set up, start the email set up wizard. TIP! If an email account is already set up, the wizard is not activated automatically. Sending an email using your new account 1 Touch from the home screen, and scroll to Email on the Communication tab to open a new blank message. 2 Enter the recipient’s address and write your message.
PAGE 161
s s n, s nt. Retrieve interval - Select how often your GD900 checks for new email messages. Include message in Fwd & Reply- Select to include the original message in any reply. Include attachment - Select to include the original attachment in any reply. Auto retrieval when Roaming Choose whether to retrieve messages automatically when abroad (roaming). New email noti. info - Choose whether to be alerted about a new e-mail with a pop-up message.
PAGE 162
Messaging Drafts - If you don’t finish writing a message, you can save what you’ve done in this folder. Threaded box - Messages (SMS) exchanged with another party can be displayed in chronological order so that you can conveniently see an overview of your conversation. My Folders - Create folders to store your messages. Using templates Create templates for the SMS and MMS messages you send most often. There are already some templates on the phone, which you can edit.
PAGE 163
y y e Text message centre - Enter the details of your message centre. Delivery report - Slide the switch left to receive confirmation that your messages have been delivered. Validity period - Choose how long your messages are stored at the message centre. Message types - Convert your text into Voice, Fax, X.400 or Email. Character encoding - Choose how your characters are encoded. This affects the size of your messages and therefore your data charges.
PAGE 164
Messaging Read reply - Choose whether to allow and/or send a read reply. Priority - Choose the priority level of your MMS. Validity period - Choose how long your message is stored at the message centre. Slide duration - Choose how long slides appear on screen. Creation mode - Restricted/ Warning/ Free Delivery time - Choose how long to wait before a message is delivered. Multimedia message centre - Enter the details of your message centre.
PAGE 165
s Camera Getting to know the viewfinder Open the slide to use the Outer Camera. Back - Touch here to return to the menu map. e. Camera mode - Shows whether the camera is in video or photo mode, and can also be used to take photos. e e e Gallery - Touch this icon to view the gallery. Exposure - See Adjusting the Exposure on page 48. Macro - Switch this on to take close up shots. Flash status - Set flash light mode to Auto, Always off or Always on. Settings - Touch this icon to open the settings menu.
PAGE 166
Camera Taking a quick photo Once you’ve taken the photo In 1 Press and hold down the camera key on the right side of the phone. 2 Holding the phone horizontally, point the lens towards the subject you want to take a picture of. 3 Press the capture button lightly and a focus box will appear in the centre of the viewfinder screen. 4 Position the phone so you can see the photo subject in the focus box. 5 When the focus box turns green, the camera has focused on your subject.
PAGE 167
o - r a Incoming call image. Using the flash Touch to edit the name of the selected picture. The default flash setting is auto, but there are other options. 1 Select from the left side of the viewfinder to enter the flash sub-menu. 2 There are three flash options: Auto - Your camera will assess the light available for a good picture and use the flash as necessary. Always off - The camera will never flash. This is useful if you want to save battery power. Always on - The camera will always flash.
PAGE 168
Camera Adjusting the exposure Ta The exposure defines the difference between light and dark areas in an image. A low contrast image will appear foggy, whereas a high contrast image will appear much sharper. 1 Touch . 2 Slide the contrast indicator along the bar towards for a lower exposure and hazier image or for a higher exposure towards and a sharper image. Or make a clockwise touch wheel on the Transparent Touchpad for higher exposure and an anti-clockwise one for lower exposure.
PAGE 169
Taking a continuous shot 1 From the viewfinder, touch to open all advanced settings options and select Shot mode and Continuous shot. 2 Position the subject in the viewfinder and press the capture button as if taking a normal photo. 3 The camera will take shots in quick succession. Using the advanced settings From the viewfinder, touch to open all advanced settings options. You can change the camera setting by scrolling the wheel. After selecting the option, touch the OK button.
PAGE 170
Camera ISO - The ISO rating determines the sensitivity of the camera’s light sensor. The higher the ISO, the more sensitive the camera will be. This is useful in darker conditions when you can not use the flash. Select the ISO value from Auto, 100, 200, 400, 800 and 1600. Auto focus - Select the way the camera will focus. Choose between Spot, Manual and Face tracking. Image quality - Choose between Super fine, Fine and Normal. The finer the quality, the sharper the photo.
PAGE 171
n TIP! The settings menu is superimposed over the viewfinder, so when you change elements of the image colour or quality you will see a preview of the image change behind the settings menu. Choosing a colour effect Changing the image size The more pixels, the larger the file, which means the files take up more memory space. If you want to store more pictures on your phone, you can change the resolution to make the files smaller. 1 Using the viewfinder, touch in the top left corner.
PAGE 172
Camera TIP! You can change a picture taken in colour to black and white or sepia, but you cannot change a picture taken in black and white or sepia to colour. Using the inner camera Your LG GD900 has an inner 640x480 camera for both video calls and taking photos. 1 To switch to the inner camera then select Swap touch camera and select Secondary. 2 After a few seconds you’ll see yourself in the viewfinder. To capture the image, press the side button as normal.
PAGE 173
os Video camera Getting to know the viewfinder Open the slide to use the Outer Camera. Back - Touch here to return to the home screen. Start recording Gallery - Touch this icon to view the gallery. Exposure - See Adjusting the Exposure on page 55. Recording speed Flash status - Set or turn off the flash. Settings - Touch this icon to open the settings menu. See Using the advanced settings on page 55 for details. TIP! You can close all shortcut options to give a clearer viewfinder screen.
PAGE 174
Video camera Shooting a quick video After shooting a video 1 Press and hold down the camera key on the right side of the phone. . Or, you 2 Then, switch to can enter this menu directly by touching Video camera. 3 The video camera’s viewfinder will appear on the screen. 4 Holding the phone horizontally, point the lens towards the subject of the video. 5 Press the capture button once to start recording. 6 Rec will appear at the bottom of the viewfinder with a timer showing the length of the video.
PAGE 175
Use Touch to use the video as Ringtone or video call ringtone. n, Rename Touch to edit the name of the selected Video. Touch to return to the previous menu. Touch to delete the video you have just made, and confirm by touching Yes. The viewfinder will reappear. Touch to shoot another video immediately. Your current video will be saved. s Touch to view the saved videos and pictures gallery. Adjusting the exposure g The exposure defines the difference between light and dark areas in an image.
PAGE 176
Video camera Changing the video image size on page 57. Scene mode - Choose between Auto or Night mode. Colour effect - Choose a colour tone to use on your new view. See Choosing a colour tone on page 58. White balance - The white balance ensures any white parts of your video are realistic. To enable your camera to adjust the white balance correctly, you may need to determine the light conditions. Choose between Auto, Incandescent, Sunny, Fluorescent or Cloudy.
PAGE 177
y. u Changing the video image size The more pixels, the larger the file size, which means the files take up more memory space. If you want to store more videos on your phone, you can change the video resolution to make the files smaller. 1 Using the viewfinder, touch in the top left corner. 2 Select Video size from the Preview menu. 3 Select a pixel value from the four options: 720X480(D1) - The highest quality, widescreen option. 640x480 - Standard sized VGA.
PAGE 178
Video camera Choosing a colour tone 1 Using the viewfinder, touch in the top left corner. 2 Select Colour effect from the Preview menu. 3 There are six colour tone options, Off, Sepia, Mono, Negative or Emboss. 4 Touch the colour tone you want to use. TIP! You can change a video shot in colour to black and white or sepia, but you cannot change a video shot in black and white or sepia to colour. Using the inner video camera Your LG GD900 has an inner 320x240 camera for both video calls and recording videos.
PAGE 179
rt Watching your saved videos 1 In the viewfinder, touch . 2 Your gallery will appear on the screen. 3 Touch a video once to bring it to the front of the gallery. It start to play automatically. Watching your videos on TV Connect your GD900 to your TV using the TV output cable. NOTE: The TV output cable is available for purchase separately. TIP! All formats except 320x240 and 176x144 are compatible with playing the video through a TV.
PAGE 180
Your photos and videos Viewing your photos and videos Using zoom when viewing a video or photo 1 Touch on the camera preview screen. 2 Your gallery will appear on the screen. 3 Touch the video or photo to open it fully. When viewing photos or videos, you can zoom in and out by pinching your fingers together or spreading them apart.
PAGE 181
ou me r t t the picture using a thumbnail at the bottom of the screen. Editing your photos You can do lots of great things to your photos to change them, add to them or liven them up. 1 Open the photo you want to edit and touch Edit to show the options. 2 Touch the icons to alter your photo: Crop your photo. Choose a square or circular crop area and move your finger across the screen to select the area. Draw something on your photo, freehand.
PAGE 182
Your photos and videos 4 Filter Touch to apply the effect options to a photo. Text Adjust ment No box This helps to adjust a picture taken using automatic colour, brightness etc. Box colour Text color Save Undo Image Filter A p 1 Adjust mant Save Adding an effect to a photo Undo 1 From the editing screen, touch Filter . 2 You can apply any of the various options to the photo 3 To undo an effect simply touch Undo .
PAGE 183
4 When you are finished with your selection, touch Save . ve do ge er ust nt s Adding a colour accent to a photo 1 From the editing screen, touch Image . 2 Choose Colour Accent. 3 Select part of the photo. A traced line will appear around everything in that area which is the same or a similar colour, for example, a person’s hair or jumper. 4 Alter the intensity of the accenting by touching Intensity and touch ‘+’ or ‘-’ button. 5 Touch OK.
PAGE 184
Your photos and videos Trimming the length of the video 7 Merging two videos 1 Open the video you want to edit, option key. touch 2 Select Edit and choose Trim/ Multi trim. 3 Touch and set the new start and end points using Trim . 4 Touch Preview to confirm you are satisfied with the new cut. 5 Touch Save or, alternatively, to return to the touch gallery and discard the changes. 1 Open the video you want to edit, option key. touch 2 Select Edit and choose Video merge. 3 The My videos folder will open.
PAGE 185
, o o ve ct ew e w 7 Repeat these steps to merge more videos. Merging a photo with a video 1 Open the video you want to edit, option key. touch 2 Select Edit and choose Image merge. 3 The My images folder will open. Choose the photo you want to move into your video and touch Select. 4 Touch and slide the photo to merge it to the end or the beginning of the video. 5 Touch Preview to choose how the photo and video merge together.
PAGE 186
Your photos and videos 7 Repeat these steps to add more text. 8 Repeat these steps to add more photos. A vi Overlaying a photo Adding a soundtrack to your video 1 1 Open the video you want to edit, option key. touch 2 Select Edit and choose Image overlay. 3 The My images folder will open. Choose the photo you want to overlay on your video. 4 Touch and pause when you want the picture to appear, then select Opacity after touching the Start button.
PAGE 187
r , o Adding live sound to your video Changing the video speed 1 Open the video you want to edit, option key. touch 2 Select Edit and choose Live dubbling. 3 Set the sound value to original sound or recording sound. dd Reset Audio mixing ratio Save Adding a dimming effect Undo Original sound Recording sound 1 Open the video you want to edit, option key. touch 2 Select Edit and choose Time scaling. 3 Select one of the options. This can vary depending on the frame rate.
PAGE 188
Multimedia You can store multimedia files in your phone’s memory so you have easy access to all your pictures, sounds, videos and games. You can also save your files to a memory card. Using a memory card allows you to free up space in your phone’s memory. To access the Multimedia menu, select My stuff from touch Multimedia tab. You can open a list of the folders that store all your multimedia files. TIP! To delete any files in then Delete.
PAGE 189
ns y, r l, o Using an image You can choose images to use as wallpapers and screensavers, or even to identify a caller. then select My stuff 1 Touch from Multimedia tab. 2 Touch My images. 3 Select an image and touch . 4 Touch Use as and choose between: Homescreens - Set a wallpaper for All homescreens, Widget, Contacts, Multimedia or Shortcut. Lock screen - Set a wallpaper for the key lock screen.
PAGE 190
Multimedia Moving or copying an image Checking your memory status An image can be moved or copied between the phone memory and the memory card. You may want to do this to clear some space in one of the memories, or to safeguard your images against loss. 1 Touch then select My stuff from Multimedia tab. 2 Touch My images. 3 Touch . 4 Select Move or Copy. You can check to see how much memory space you have used and how much you have left. 1 Touch then select My stuff from Multimedia tab. 2 Touch My images.
PAGE 191
us d 4 Select a sound and touch the play icon. It will start to play. 5 You can use the sound for various tones by selecting the Use as menu. 6 Choose between Voice ringtone, Video ringtone and Message tone. Videos The My videos folder shows a list of videos you have downloaded or recorded on your phone. Watching a video then select My stuff 1 Touch on the Multimedia tab. 2 Touch My videos. 3 Select a video to play.
PAGE 192
Multimedia Playing a game 1 Touch then select Games & Apps on the Multimedia tab. 2 Touch Games or Applications menu. 3 Touch Launch button to launch a game or an application. Using the options menu Within Games and Application folders, the following options are available: • New folder: Create a folder within Games or Applications • Sort by: Sort the games and applications by Date, Name, Size or Memory • Memory manager: View the memory status handset or external memory. • Folder info.
PAGE 193
. d Documents This is possible with your Excel, PowerPoint, Word, Text and pdf files. Viewing a file 1 Touch then select My stuff from Multimedia tab. 2 Touch Documents. 3 Select a document and touch View. Transferring a file to your phone Bluetooth is probably the easiest way of transferring a file from your computer to your phone. You can also use LG PC Suite via your sync cable, see page 84 for details. To transfer files (e.g.
PAGE 194
Multimedia 4 Touch the Sound tab on the screen to change the sound, e.g. for a voice recording. 5 Touch the Preview button to see the results. 6 Touch the Play Order tab on the screen to change the order. 7 Touch the Saved in tab on the screen to choose where to save the movie, and touch the Usage tab to choose between storing it and MMS. 8 To save your movie touch Save movie. Music Your LG GD900 has a built-in music player that lets you play all your favourite tracks.
PAGE 195
c c ic s: u Transferring music onto your phone The easiest way to transfer music onto your phone is via Bluetooth or the data cable. You can also use LG PC Suite, see page 84 for details. To transfer music using Bluetooth: 1 Make sure both devices have Bluetooth switched on and are connected to each other. 2 Select the music file on the other device and select send via Bluetooth. 3 When the file is sent, you will have to accept it on your phone by touching Yes.
PAGE 196
Multimedia Creating a playlist Deleting a playlist You can create your own playlists by choosing a selection of songs from the All tracks folder. 1 Touch then select Music from the Multimedia tab. 2 Touch the option icon. 3 Touch New playlist, enter the playlist name and touch . 4 The All tracks folder will be displayed. Touch all of the songs that you would like to include in your playlist; a tick will appear next to these track names. 5 Touch Add songs. To play a playlist, select it and touch Play.
PAGE 197
FM Radio Set as channel Listen via Volume Resetting channels n r 3 Touch Auto scan then Yes. The stations found will be allocated to channel numbers in your phone by selecting Set, Skip and Stop. NOTE: You can also manually tune to a station by using the wheel displayed next to the radio frequency. Searching for stations You can tune your phone to radio stations by searching for them manually or automatically. They will then be saved to specific channel numbers, so you don’t have to keep re-tuning.
PAGE 198
Multimedia O Listening to the radio A ca 1 Touch then select FM radio from Multimedia tab. 2 Touch the channel number of the station you would like to listen to. TIP! To improve radio reception, extend the headset cord, which functions as the radio aerial. Warning! If you connect the headset not specifically made for it to the phone, the radio reception can be interfered.
PAGE 199
Organiser Adding an event to your calendar 1 From the home screen select then scroll to Organiser on the Utilities tab. 2 Select the date to which you want to add an event. then New schedule. 3 Touch 4 Touch Category then choose between Appointment, Anniversary or Birthday. Check the date and enter the time you want your event to begin. 5 For appointments and anniversaries, you can enter the time and date the event finishes in the lower time and date boxes.
PAGE 200
Organiser Adding an item to your To Do list 1 From the home screen select then scroll to Organiser on the Utilities tab. select New task and 2 Select touch Note. 3 Set the date for the task, add notes, then select its priority level: High, Medium or Low. . 4 Save the task by selecting TIP! You can back up and synchronise your calendar with your computer. See PC Sync on page 84.
PAGE 201
e m Setting your alarm Adding a memo 1 From the home screen select then scroll to Alarms on the Utilities tab. 2 If you want add a new alarm, touch New alarm. If you want to set the alarm to sound again within one hour, touch Quick alarm. 3 Set the time you would like the alarm to sound. 4 Choose whether you want the alarm to repeat, set the repeat and type. The icons indicate the weekday you select. 5 Select Sound/ Vibration to select the type of alarm you want.
PAGE 202
Organiser Recording a sound or voice Sending the voice recording 1 Touch . 2 Touch Voice recorder in Utilities tap. 3 Choose where to save the recording between Handset and External. 4 Choose recording mode between General and MMS. 5 Touch Rec. to begin recording. 6 Touch Stop to end recording. 1 Once you have finished recording, you can send the audio clip by touching Send. 2 Choose Message, Email or Bluetooth.
PAGE 203
g n he ÷), 4 For more complex calculations, touch and choose between sin, cos, tan, deg, log, etc.. Converting a unit 1 From the home screen select , then scroll to Tools on the Utilities tab. 2 Select Unit converter. 3 Choose whether you want to convert Currency, Area, Length, Weight, Temperature, Volume or Velocity. 4 Then select the unit and enter the value you would like to convert from. 5 The corresponding values then will appear on the screen.
PAGE 204
PC Suite You can synchronise your PC with your phone. This will ensure all your important details and dates match, and also act as a back up to help your mind at ease. Caution! If installation guide message is not displayed in your PC, please check your CD-ROM setting on Windows. 3 TIP! To do this, you will need to install the PC Suite application provided on the CD-ROM or available as a download from http://update.lgmobile. com. (From www.lgmobile.
PAGE 205
r n. 3 Your phone and PC are now connected. Backing up and restoring your phone‘s information 1 Connect your phone to your PC as outlined above. 2 Click on the Backup icon, and select Backup or Restore. 3 Choose whether to back up Contents Data and/or Phonebook/Schedule/Todo/ Memo Data. Select the location you want to back up the information to, or restore it from. Click OK. 4 Your information will be backed up. y Viewing phone files on your PC 1 Connect your phone to your PC as outlined above.
PAGE 206
PC Suite your contacts and choose Select all, then Copy or Move to phone memory. Right-click your contacts and select Copy to contact. Now click on the Handset folder on the left side of the screen and all your numbers will be displayed. Synchronising your messages 1 Connect the phone to your PC. 2 Click on the Messages icon. 3 All your PC and phone messages will be displayed in folders on the screen. 4 Use the tool bar at the top of your screen to edit and rearrange messages.
PAGE 207
ll . e m 6. Install Windows Media Player version 11(WMP 11). 7. When WMP is successfully installed, connect the mobile phone to your PC. Transferring music using Windows Media Player 1 From the home screen select , then scroll to Connectivity on the Settings tab. 2 Select USB connection mode and choose Music sync. 3 Connect your handset and PC using a compatible USB cable. 4 When you try to connect the handset to your PC, your handset will read: Music Sync... followed by Connected.
PAGE 208
PC Suite NOTE: When using Bluetooth, you have to select ISync on in option menu. TIP! To install the iSync menu in Macintosh PC, please visit the website www.lgmobile.com and download the plug-in for iSync. DivX Converter 88 Install the DivX converter, which is supplied on the same CD as the PC Sync software. DivX will convert media files on your PC to a format that lets you upload them and view them on your phone.
PAGE 209
re x. e e The web Browser Browser gives you a fast, full-colour world of games, music, news, sport, entertainment and loads more, straight to your mobile phone. Wherever you are and whatever you’re into. Accessing the web 1 From the home screen select then scroll to Browser on the Communication tab. 2 To go straight to the browser home page, select Home. Alternatively, select Enter address and type in the URL. NOTE: You will incur extra cost by connecting to these services and downloading content.
PAGE 210
The web Using the RSS reader Accessing a saved page RSS (Really Simple Syndication) is a family of web feed formats used to publish frequently updated content, such as blog entries, news headlines or podcasts. An RSS document, called a feed, web feed or channel, contains either a summary of content from an associated website or its full text. RSS makes it possible for people to keep up-to-date with their favourite web sites in an automated way that is easier than checking manually.
PAGE 211
w y e Changing web browser settings 1 From the home screen select then scroll to Connectivity on the Settings tab. 2 Select Browser settings. 3 You can edit the Profiles, Appearance settings, Cache/ Cookies, Security or Reset settings. 4 You can simply set these on or off by touching the switch icon. Using your phone as a modem Your GD900 can be used as a modem for your PC, giving you email and internet access even when you don’t have any wired connection.
PAGE 212
The web Using Bluetooth: 1 Ensure Bluetooth is switched On and Visible for both your PC and GD900. 2 Pair your PC and GD900 so that a passcode is required to connect them. 3 Use the Connection wizard on your LG PC Suite to create an active Bluetooth connection. 4 click Inernetkit on your PCsuite. Then click New and select Modem. 5 Click Modem. 6 Choose Standard Modem over Bluetooth link and click OK. It will now appear on the screen. 7 Click Connect and your PC will connect via your GD900.
PAGE 213
n. ur Settings This folder lets you adapt your settings to personalise your GD900. NOTE: For information on call settings see page 34. Changing your screen settings 1 From the home screen, select then scroll to Screen settings on the Settings tab. 2 You can choose the option menu from: Wallpaper - Choose an image for Home screen, locking, switching the phone on or off, or making or receiving a call. NOTE: The setting will be reset if you select Reset menu.
PAGE 214
Settings 2 Choose the profile you want to edit: Normal, Silent, Outdoor or Flight mode. 3 You can then change all sounds and alert options available in the list, including your Voice/Video ringtone, Volume, Message alerts and others. Changing your phone settings Use the freedom of adapting the GD900 to your own preferences. 1 From the home screen, select then scroll to Phone settings on the Settings tab.
PAGE 215
ay. d Changing your touch settings From the home screen select From the home screen select then scroll to Phone settings on Settings tab. Choose Touch settings. Touch vibration - Change the vibration On/Off. Vibration type - Vibration 1/2/3 Vibration volume - Controls the strength of vibration. Touch sound - Change the tone when touching the screen. Sound - Sound 1/2/3 Volume - Controls the volume of tone.
PAGE 216
Settings vod.divx.com to register and for technical support. Packet data conn. - Set the packet data connection. Browser setting - Set the values related to the browser. Streaming settings - Your network operator has already saved this information. You can edit it if you want to make changes. Java settings - Allows you to set profiles for connections made by Java programs and to view certificates.
PAGE 217
s, y Using flight mode Turn flight mode on by selecting then Settings. Touch Profiles and select Flight mode. Flight mode prevents you making calls, connecting to the Internet, sending messages or using Bluetooth. Sending and receiving files using Bluetooth Bluetooth is a great way to send and receive files as it uses no wires and connection is quick and easy. You can also connect to a Bluetooth headset to make and receive calls.
PAGE 218
Settings To receive a file: 1 To receive files your Bluetooth must be set to On. See Changing your Bluetooth settings below for more information. 2 A message will prompt you to accept the file from the sender. Touch Yes to receive the file. 3 You will see where the file has been saved and choose to View the file or Use as. Files will usually be saved to the appropriate folder in My stuff.
PAGE 219
a r e ns Pairing with another Bluetooth device By pairing your GD900 with another device, you can set up a passcodeprotected connection. This makes pairing more secure. 1 Check that your Bluetooth is On. You can change your visibility using the Settings menu. 2 Touch New Device. 3 Your GD900 will search for Bluetooth devices. When the search is completed Refresh will appear on the screen. 4 Choose the device you want to pair with and enter a passcode, then touch OK.
PAGE 220
Wi-Fi Wireless Manager allows you to manage Internet connections per Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) on your device. It allows the phone to connect to local wireless networks, or access the Internet wirelessly. Wi-Fi is faster and has a greater range than Bluetooth wireless technology and can be used for fast emailing and Internet browsing. NOTE: The GD900 supports WEP, WPA-PSK/2 encryption, and not EAP, WPS encryption.
PAGE 221
b P 2) Saving the frequently-used AP as a profile makes it easier to enter the Security key when connecting to an AP with that Security type. 3) If the AP does not support DHCP, you can connect to the AP using a static IP address. 2 Description of each field in the Wi-Fi profile. 1) Network name: SSID (ID) 2) Security type: WEP, WPA-PSK/2 support. 3) Security key: saves the security key. 4) IP/DNS setting: this allows you to set to Automatic or Static depending on whether the AP supports DHCP.
PAGE 222
Software Update Software Update LG Mobile Phone Software Update Program For more information on installing and using this program, please visit http://update.lgmobile.com. This feature allows you to update your software to the latest version quickly and conveniently over the Internet without needing to visit our service centre.
PAGE 223
e Accessories There are a variety of accessories available for your mobile phone, which may be sold separately. You can select these options according to your personal communication requirements. Consult your local dealer for availability. (Items described below may be optional.) Charger Battery Stereo headset Data cable and CD Connect and synchronise your GD900 and PC. User Guide Learn more about your GD900. GD900 User Guide NOTE: • Always use genuine LG accessories.
PAGE 224
Network service Technical data The wireless phone described in this guide is approved for use on E-GSM 900, DCS 1800, GSM 850, PCS 1900 and W-CDMA networks. A number of features included in this guide are called Network Services. These are special services that you arrange through your wireless service provider. Before you can take advantage of any of these Network Services, you must subscribe to them through your service provider and obtain instructions for their use from your service provider.
PAGE 225
E-GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / GSM 850 / PCS 1900 Quad Band and WCDMA Terminal Equipment GD900 R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC EN 301 489-1 V1.6.1 / EN 301 489-7 V1.3.1 / EN 301 489-17 V1.2.1 / EN 301 489-24 V1.3.1 EN 60950-1: 2001 EN 50360 / EN62209-1: 2006 EN 301 511 V9.0.2 / EN 301 908-1 V3.2.1 / EN 301 908-2 V3.2.1 EN 300 328 V1.7.
PAGE 226
Guidelines for safe and efficient use Please read these simple guidelines. Not following these guidelines may be dangerous or illegal. Exposure to radio frequency energy Radio wave exposure and Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) information This mobile phone model GD900 has been designed to comply with applicable safety requirements for exposure to radio waves.
PAGE 227
n r rs d Product care and maintenance WARNING Only use batteries, chargers and accessories approved for use with this particular phone model. The use of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty applying to the phone, and may be dangerous. • Do not disassemble this unit. Take it to a qualified service technician when repair work is required. • Keep away from electrical appliances such as TVs, radios, and personal computers.
PAGE 228
Guidelines for safe and efficient use • Do not subject this unit to excessive smoke or dust. • Do not keep the phone next to credit cards or transport tickets; it can affect the information on the magnetic strips. • Do not tap the screen with a sharp object as it may damage the phone. • Do not expose the phone to liquid or moisture. • Use the accessories like earphones cautiously. Do not touch the antenna unnecessarily.
PAGE 229
, • Use a hands-free kit, if available. • Pull off the road and park before making or answering a call if driving conditions so require. • RF energy may affect some electronic systems in your vehicle such as car stereos and safety equipment. • When your vehicle is equipped with an air bag, do not obstruct with installed or portable wireless equipment. It can cause the air bag to fail or cause serious injury due to improper performance.
PAGE 230
Guidelines for safe and efficient use Blasting area Children Do not use the phone where blasting is in progress. Observe restrictions, and follow any regulations or rules. Keep the phone in a safe place out of the reach of small children. It includes small parts which may cause a choking hazard if detached. Potentially explosive atmospheres Emergency calls • Do not use the phone at a refueling point. • Do not use near fuel or chemicals.
PAGE 231
d. s. nd y e • Do not disassemble or short-circuit the battery pack. • Keep the metal contacts of the battery pack clean. • Replace the battery when it no longer provides acceptable performance. The battery pack maybe recharged hundreds of times until it needs replacing. • Recharge the battery if it has not been used for a long time to maximize usability. • Do not expose the battery charger to direct sunlight or use it in high humidity, such as in the bathroom.
PAGE 232
Trouble Shooting This chapter lists some problems you might encounter while using your phone. Some problems require you to call your service provider, but most are easy for you to correct yourself. M Message Possible causes Possible Solutions SIM error There is no SIM card in the phone or it is inserted incorrectly. Make sure the SIM card is correctly inserted. No network connection Signal weak Outside GSM network area Move towards a window or into an open area.
PAGE 233
Message Possible causes Possible Solutions Battery totally empty Charge battery. Temperature out of range Make sure the ambient temperature is right, wait for a while, and then charge again. Contact problem Check the power supply and connection to the phone. Check the battery contacts and clean them if necessary. No mains voltage Plug in to a different socket or check the voltage. Charger defective If the charger does not warm up, replace it. Wrong charger Only use original LG accessories.
PAGE 234